Samsung | YP-S3CB | Samsung YP-S3AR راهنمای کاربر

‫‪YP-S3‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮ ‚ ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪www.samsung.com/global/register‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻡ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ﺟﺎﻟﺐ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺿﺪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻢ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴﺐ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﮑﻨﻮﻟﻮژی ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪﺍﻧﻪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻏﻨﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﻭﺟﺎﻟﺐ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎی ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺷﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻌﺠﺐ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺮ!‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ”ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ” ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 25‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣ ً‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ )ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی ﺑﺎ ‪ USB 2.0‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ‪ USB 1.1‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﯽ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﻢ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﮔﻮﺵ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮔﻴﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﮕﻔﺘﯽ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪) DNSe‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺻﺪﺍی‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ( ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺮﺩ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﻏﻨﯽ ﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻴﻖ ﺗﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﺎﻭﺭﻧﮑﺮﺩﻧﯽ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﻟﻤﺴﻲ!‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻨﺎ‚ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻕ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﺎی ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﺮگ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺟﺪی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺎﺩی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎی ﺗﺬﮐﺮﺍﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺟﻌﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻌﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺻﺮﻳﺤﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺻﺮﻳﺤﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﺟﺪی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺒﺬﻭﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﻨﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻴﺲ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺁﺏ ﻧﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻴﺲ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮی ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﺪﺭ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻋﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‚ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﭼﺮﺧﻪ ﺳﻮﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻮﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﻮﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﮦ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ۔‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﮦ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻭﮦ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﮐﺮﺩﮦ ﺍﺳﺖ۔‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ‚ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﻭﺭﺯﺵ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻭﺍﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎک ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮک ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 85‬ﺩﺳﯽ ﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺕ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺟﺪی ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫)ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺻﺪﺍی ‪ 50‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 60‬ﺩﺳﯽ ﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺳﺮﻭﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 80‬ﺩﺳﯽ ﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ(‪ .‬ﻗﻮﻳﺎً ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻻ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ً‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺵ)ﻫﺎﻱ( ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‚ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ،(35°C)95°F‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﻮﻧﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭی ﭘﺎﺭک ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎک ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻟﺪﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﮐﭙﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪﻥ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻴﻨﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی‪ ،‬ﺷﻮک ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﺴﻤﺎﻧﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ”‪ “Fit to Page‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١۴‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢۴‬‬
‫‪٢۵‬‬
‫‪٢۶‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ”ﺑﺮﺍﻭﺯﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ“‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﺯﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ )ﺭﻳﺴﺖ( ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪SAMSUNG MEDIA‬‬
‫‪STUDIO‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫‪٣۴‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Samsung‬‬
‫‪Media Studio‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ )‪(Removable Disk‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫‪۴۵‬‬
‫‪۴۶‬‬
‫‪۴٧‬‬
‫‪۴٧‬‬
‫‪۴٨‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺟﺎﺭی‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫‪۴١‬‬
‫‪۴١‬‬
‫‪۴١‬‬
‫‪۴١‬‬
‫‪۴١‬‬
‫‪۴٢‬‬
‫‪۴٢‬‬
‫‪۴٣‬‬
‫‪۵۶‬‬
‫‪۵٧‬‬
‫‪۵٧‬‬
‫‪۵٧‬‬
‫‪۵٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬
‫‪۴۴‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬
‫‪۵۶‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫‪۶٠‬‬
‫‪۶١‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪۶۵‬‬
‫‪۶۶‬‬
‫‪۶۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎ ﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮ ﺩ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪ ﺍ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪٧۵‬‬
‫‪٧۶‬‬
‫‪٧۶‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ >‪<MEDIA STUDIO‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫‪٨۴‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪۶٠‬‬
‫‪۶۵‬‬
‫‪٧۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﻮ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺬﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﻫﺮﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮی ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ CD‬ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻤﯽ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ١٠‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺑﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪ Hold‬ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻠﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ /‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺨﻮﺑﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‚ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺏ ﺷﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﺩﺭﺍﺯﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺪ ‚ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻧﮓ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪١١‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ "ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻟﻤﺴﯽ" ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫‪Menu‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺍک‪ /‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﺍک‬
‫ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﮐﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ /‬ﻣﮑﺚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ /‬ﻣﮑﺚ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‪ /‬ﻣﻨﻮی‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺍک‪ /‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﻌﺪی ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﮐﻬﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ١٢‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﻓﻴﺶ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ”‪ “L‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﻮﺵ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ”‪“R‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﻮﺵ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ MP3‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ‪/‬ﺁﻻﺭﻡ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻨﺞ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‪ /‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻩ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪15/20‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪ /‬ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺚ‚ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬
‫‪١۴‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪١۵‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺪ ‪DNSe‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪١۴‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪١۵‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪04:28‬‬
‫‪02:13‬‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ _ ١۴‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪Video Track 1‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ‪/‬ﺁﻻﺭﻡ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻨﺞ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺪ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻣﮑﺚ‪ ،‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪١۵‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪Pictures‬‬
‫‪1/8‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪Picture Image 1.jpg‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ‪/‬ﺁﻻﺭﻡ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻨﺞ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‪ /‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫]ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ[‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ‪/‬ﺁﻻﺭﻡ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻨﺞ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪/‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ )ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪ _ ١۶‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮک ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ƒ‬
‫ƒ‬
‫ƒ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﻴﯽ ﺑﺠﺰ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮑﺶ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ mp3‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ƒ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﮦ )‬
‫‪ _ ١٨‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫( ‪ USB‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﻤﺎ ﻋﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺗﺮی ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ (5° ~ 35°C) 40 ~ 95°F‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی )ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 12‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ( ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﭗ ﺗﺎپ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﭗ ﺗﺎپ‬
‫ﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻟﭗ ﺗﺎپ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﮐﺎﻣ ً‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻳﭻ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ‬
‫ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﮑﺚ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭽﻴﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ mp3‬ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ >‪ ١ <Auto Power Off‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ‚ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 30‬ﺭﺍﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Samsung Media Studio‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺦﺵ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ mp3‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٣۶~٣۴‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ‪ Media Studio‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪15/20‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Music‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪02:13‬‬
‫‪04:28‬‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪15/20‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺣﻮﺯﻩ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺁﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫‪04:28‬‬
‫‪ _ ٢٠‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫‪02:13‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪) Hold‬ﻗﻔﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ mp3‬ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻼ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ‪ -‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺩچﺍﺭ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍی ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ -‬ﻣﺜ ً‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺳﻮﻳﭻ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺳﻮﻳﭻ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪15/20‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫‪04:28‬‬
‫‪02:13‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻭﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ”ﺑﺮﺍﻭﺯﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ“‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﮦ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ”‪ ،“File Browser‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ۔‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <File Browser‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ¬ی >‪) <File Browser‬ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ( ﺣﺎﻭی »ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺘﺎﮐﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ« ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۶‬ﺑﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﺯﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <File Browser‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪File Browser‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Playlists‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫ƒ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ¬ی >‪) <File Browser‬ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ( ﺣﺎﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Pictures‬‬
‫‪Datacasts‬‬
‫‪Texts‬‬
‫‪Recorded Files‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Delete‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۶‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫‪ _ ٢٢‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ mp3‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﯽﺣﺎﺗﯽ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎی ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻭﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Settings‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Settings‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ >‪<Menu Stayle‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Menu Style‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫‪Menu Style‬‬
‫‪Sound‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫‪Library Update‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ /‬ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ƒ ‪ :Menu Design‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺒﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ>‪ <Crystal>‚<Sparkling‬ﻭ >‪ <My Skin‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ :Font‬ﺷﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٣‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ >‪ <Font‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Reset My Skin‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ >‪ <Sparkling‬ﻳﺎ >‪ <Crystal‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ >‪ <Menu Design‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪<Reset My Skin>،‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‚ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﭗ ﻭ ﺣﺪ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Settings‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Settings‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪Menu Style‬‬
‫‪Sound‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫‪Library Update‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ >‪<Sound‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Sound‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Master EQ‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ‬
‫]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Beep Sound‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﭗ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫>‪ <Off‬ﻭ>‪ <On‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Volume Limit‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ <On> .‬ﺣﺪ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﺎ ‪ 15‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻟﻮﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ >‪ <Off‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‚ ‪ 30‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ >‪ <Off‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ‚ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ‪ 15‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٢۴‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Settings‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Settings‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Display‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Display‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪Menu Style‬‬
‫‪Sound‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫‪Library Update‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Display Off‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻜﻤﻪ ﺍﻯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺫﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎ ﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻰ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﻯ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ>‪,<3 min>,<1 min>,<30 sec>,<15 sec‬‬
‫>‪ <5 min‬ﻭ >‪ .<Always On‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁ ﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Screen Saver‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی>‪، <Analog Clock>، <Cheers>، <Blue Rain>، <Sweet >، <Auto Change‬‬
‫> ‪ < Digital Clock‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی>‪<Off‬‬
‫‪ < 3min> ، <1min>، <30sec>، <15sec> ،‬ﻭ>‪ <5min‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍی ﻃﯽ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ] [ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Brightness‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ >‪ <0-10‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪10‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪٢۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Settings‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Settings‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Library Update‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Library Update‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪Menu Style‬‬
‫‪Sound‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫‪Library Update‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Manual Update‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی >‪ <Off‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ >‪ <Browser File‬ﻭ >‪ <Music Browser‬ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ >‪ <Music‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی >‪ <Yes‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Auto Update‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ >‪ <Auto Update‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ‚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ>‪ <On‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٢۶‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
(‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ‬.‫ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‬MP3 ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
.‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Settings
Menu Style
Sound
Display
Library Update
Language
Time
System
‫ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی‬.١
.‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‬
<Settings> ‫ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬،‫ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‬.٢
.‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
.‫< ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬Settings>‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ‬
<Language> ‫ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬،‫ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‬.٣
.‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
.‫< ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬Language>‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ‬
] ‫ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ‬،‫ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‬.۴
.‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی‬.‫ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‬: Menu ƒ
<English>, <
>, <Français>, <Deutsch>, <Italiano>,
<
>, <
>, <
>, <Español>, <Русский>, <Magyar>,
<Nederlands>, <Polski>, <Português>, <Svenska>, <ไทย>, <Čeština>,
<Ελληνικά>, <Türkçe>, <Norsk>, <Dansk>, <Suomi>, <Español
(Sudamérica)>, <Português (Brasil)>, <Indonesia>, <Tiếng Việt>,
<Bulgarian>, <Română>, <Українська>, <Slovenščina> ‫< ﻭ‬Slovenský>.
.‫ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﻬﺎ‬: Contents ƒ
<English>, <Korean>, <French>, <German>, <Italian>, <Japanese>,
<Simplified Chinese>, <Tranditional Chinese>, <Spanish>, <Russian>,
<Hungarian>, <Dutch>, <Polish>, <Portuguese>, <Swedish>, <Thai>,
<Finnish>, <Danish>, <Norwegian>, <Farsi>, <Afrikaans>, <Basque>,
<Catalan>, <Czech>, <Estonian>, <Greek>, <Hrvatski>, <Icelandic>,
<Rumanian>, <Slovak>, <Slovene>, <Turkish> ‫< ﻭ‬Vietnamese>.
٢٧ _ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
.‫ƒ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Settings‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Settings‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Time‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Time‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪Menu Style‬‬
‫‪Sound‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫‪Library Update‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Date & Time‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ >‪ <Year, Month, Date ,Hour, Min, AM/PM‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Date Type‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ <MM-DD-YY>، <YY-MM-DD‬ﻭ>‪.<DD-MM-YY‬‬
‫ƒ ‪) Time Zone‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﺖ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٨٧‬‬
‫‪ _ ٢٨‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‚ ﻣﺪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‚ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﺮﻕ‚ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Settings‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Settings‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<System‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪Menu Style‬‬
‫‪Sound‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫‪Library Update‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <System‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Sleep‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی >‪،<Off‬‬
‫>‪ <90min>، <60 min>، <30 min>، <15min‬ﻳﺎ >‪ <120min‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Start Mode‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ >‪ <Home‬ﻭ >‪ <Last State‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ <Home> .‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ >‪ <Last State‬ﺍﺯﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Auto Power Off‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﮑﺚ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی >‪<1 min >، <30 sec>، <15 sec‬‬
‫> ‪ <5 min>، <3 min‬ﻳﺎ >‪ <Always On‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Default Set‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺯﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ >‪ <Yes‬ﻳﺎ >‪ <No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ >‪ <Yes‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ >‪ <No‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Format‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ >‪ <Yes‬ﻳﺎ >‪ <No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ >‪ <Yes‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎک ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ >‪ <No‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ : About‬ﻭﺭﺷﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﻭ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ <Firmware Version‬ﻭﺭﺷﻦ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺗﻮﺭی ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<Used‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ‪ <Avaliable> ،‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ > ‪<Total‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ‪ 1‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ = ‪ 1,000,000,000‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪ :‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻧﺮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٣٠‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ )ﺭﻳﺴﺖ( ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻴﮑﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ )ﺭﻳﺴﺖ( ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ‪ Reset‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﮦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺷﯽ ﻧﻮک ﺗﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺳﻨﺠﺎﻕ ﻗﻔﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ۔‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ )ﺭﻳﺴﺖ( ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮی ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪٣١‬‬
‫‪Samsung Media Studio‬‬
‫‪ Samsung Media Studio‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﻼ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫‪ Media Studio‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﮐﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Media Studio‬ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫• ‪ Pentium 500MHz‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫• ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ‪USB 2.0‬‬
‫• ‪Windows 2000/XP/Vista‬‬
‫• ‪ DirectX 9.0‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫• ‪ 100‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻫﺎﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫• )ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ‪ CD ROM (2X‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫• ‪ Windows Media Player 9.0‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫• ﺩﻗﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ 1024 x 768‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫• ‪ Internet Explorer 6.0‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫• ‪ 512‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫‪samsung media studio _ ٣٢‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺳﺮﭘﺮﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ‪ <Media Studio> ،‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺳﺮﭘﺮﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ CD-ROM‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺭﻭی >‪ <Install now‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﮑﺘﺎﭘﮑﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ‪ CD-ROM‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ‪ CD‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ CD‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٣ _ samsung media studio‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪SAMSUNG MEDIA STUDIO‬‬
‫>‪ <Media Studio‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ<ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ> ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﮦ )‬
‫(‪ USB‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ > ‪ USB‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ< ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ <Media Studio> ،‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫‪ Media Studio‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﮑﺘﺎپ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ Gracenote‬ﻭ ®‪Gracenote CDDB‬‬
‫‪ Music Recognition ServiceSM‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ CDDB‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ‪ Gracenote‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻮﮔﻮ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭی ‪،Gracenote‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﮔﻮ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭی ‪ Gracenote CDDB‬ﻭ ﻟﻮﮔﻮی »‪،«Powered by Gracenote CDDB‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ‪ Gracenote‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ Music Recognition Service .‬ﻭ ‪ MRS‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ‪ Gracenote‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪samsung media studio _ ٣۴‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪SAMSUNG MEDIA‬‬
‫‪) STUDIO‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪YP-S٣‬‬
‫]‪Music < [YP-S٣‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ ETC‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻦ‚ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ( ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‚‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺭﻭی >‪ <Add file‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪Media Studio‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ >‪ <Open‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی‬
‫>‪ <Open‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫>‪ <Media Studio‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺭﻭی ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪YP-S٣‬‬
‫]‪Music < [YP-S٣‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٣۵ _ samsung media studio‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪SAMSUNG MEDIA‬‬
‫‪) STUDIO‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻫﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﮦ ﺍﺯ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﮦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪ svi.‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ۔ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﮦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ۔ ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ>‪‚<Media Studio‬ﺁﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ JPG‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻛﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ‚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺖ ‪ 32‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ Samsung Media Studio‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﮏ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫‪ Media Studio‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی >‪ <Help> ← <Help> ← <MENU‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫>‪ <Media Studio‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ SVI‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫ﺣﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻱ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ )‪ (SVI‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪samsung media studio _ ٣۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ )‪(REMOVABLE DISK‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ـ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ <S3> ← < My Computer> .٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﮑﺘﺎپ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫>‪ <S3‬ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪) DRM‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﮦ ﺍﺯ > ‪ < Media Studio‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮦ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ۔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ƒ ‪ DRM‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫»ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ« )‪ (DRM‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭی ﻭ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﻊ ﻭ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺸﺮ )ﮐﭙﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ( ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ DRM‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﮑﻨﻮﻟﻮژی ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٧ _ samsung media studio‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﮑﺘﺎپ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬
‫ﭼﭗ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺭﻭی >‪Safely Remove USB Mass‬‬
‫‪ <Storage Device Drive‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١1‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢2‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻼﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪samsung media studio _ ٣٨‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪ -‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪15/20‬‬
‫‪Now Playing‬‬
‫‪Artists‬‬
‫‪Albums‬‬
‫‪Songs‬‬
‫‪Genres‬‬
‫‪Playlists‬‬
‫‪Recorded Files‬‬
‫‪Music Browser‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫‪02:13‬‬
‫‪04:28‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Music‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ >‪ <Music‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫ƒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ _ ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺁﺭﺗﻴﺴﺖ‚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‚ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭ ﺳﺒﻚ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺎگ ‪ ID3‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪) ID3 Tag‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ( ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ]‪) [Unknown‬ﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺭﺗﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﺭﺗﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺒﻚ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻭﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ‪ MP3، WMA‬ﻭ ‪ Ogg‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ MP1‬ﻳﺎ ‪ MP2‬ﮐﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪ MP3‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ ID3 Tag‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫‪ ID3 Tag‬ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺒﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺒﮏ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪_ ۴٠‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺮﺍک ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺗﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺟﺎﺭی‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ[ ﺭﺍ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺟﺎﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪ ،VBR‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ[ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍک ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ _ ‪۴١‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺎ >‪ ‚ <Media Studio‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ‚ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ـ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Media Studio‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪YP-S٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫]‪Music < [YP-S٣‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺭﻭی >‪ <Playlists‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ >‪ <Media studio‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ >‪ <Playlists‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺭﻭی >‪ <New Playlists‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ >‪ < Create Playlists‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی >‪ <OK‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ >‪ <Playlists‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪_ ۴٢‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪YP-S٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺭﻭی >‪ <My PC‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ >‪ <My PC‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺭﻭی >‪ <Playlists‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ >‪ <Playlists‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ >‪ <My PC‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ _ ‪۴٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪YP-S٣‬‬
‫]‪Music < [YP-S٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺭﻭی >‪ <Playlists‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ >‪ <Playlists‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺭﻭی >‪ <Playlists‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ > ‪ <Playlists > ← < File Browser‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪_ ۴۴‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻼ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﻭﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‚ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ”ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ“ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<File Browser‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Music‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Life is cool‬‬
‫‪My love‬‬
‫‪Add to Playlist‬‬
‫‪Delete from Pla..‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ )ﻫﺎی( ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Add to Playlist‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ >‪ <Playlists 1‬ﺑﻪ >‪ <Playlists 5‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۶‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ >‪<Playlists 1>← <Playlists> ← <Music‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ > ‪ <Playlists 5‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Life is cool‬‬
‫‪My love‬‬
‫‪Playlist 1‬‬
‫‪Playlist 2‬‬
‫‪Playlist 3‬‬
‫‪Playlist 4‬‬
‫‪Playlist 5‬‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 100‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )>‪<Playlist 1‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ >‪.(<Playlist 5‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ _ ‪۴۵‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Music‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Now Playing‬‬
‫‪Artists‬‬
‫‪Albums‬‬
‫‪Songs‬‬
‫‪Genres‬‬
‫‪Playlists‬‬
‫‪Recorded Files‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ >‪ <Music‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Playlists‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ)ﻫﺎﻱ( ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Music Browser‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺸﯽ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ >‪) <No file‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ( ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ƒ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ۴٢‬ﻭ ‪ ۴۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﻱ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫>‪ <Media Studio‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪_ ۴۶‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪1/5‬‬
‫‪Playlists‬‬
‫‪Playlist 1‬‬
‫‪Playlist 2‬‬
‫‪Playlist 3‬‬
‫‪Playlist 4‬‬
‫‪Playlist 5‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Music‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Playlist 1‬‬
‫‪Life is cool‬‬
‫‪My love‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ >‪ <Music‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Delete from Playlist‬‬
‫‪Delete All from ..‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Playlists‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ۔‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۶‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Delete from Playlist‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻞ ‪ ٤-١‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﻪ ]‬
‫‪Playlist 1‬‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Life is cool‬‬
‫‪My love‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Delete from Pla..‬‬
‫‪Delete All from Pla‬‬
‫‪ .۶‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Delete All from Playlist‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ _ ‪۴٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ -‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻭﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮﻱ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪15/20‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Music‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Sound Effect‬‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫‪Play Mode‬‬
‫‪Music Play Scre..‬‬
‫‪Add to Alarm‬‬
‫‪Play Speed‬‬
‫‪Rising‬‬
‫‪Sun‬‬
‫‪Skip Interval‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Sound Effect‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Sound Effect‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻓﮑﺖ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪04:28‬‬
‫‪02:13‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Street Mode‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻭ ﺻﺎﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ <Off> .‬ﻳﺎ >‪ <On‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Clarity‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺏ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ >‪ <٢-٠‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪_ ۴٨‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ)‪(DNSe‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪15/20‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Music‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Sound Effect‬‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫‪Play Mode‬‬
‫‪Music Play Scre..‬‬
‫‪Add to Alarm‬‬
‫‪Play Speed‬‬
‫‪Rising‬‬
‫‪Sun‬‬
‫‪Skip Interval‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <DNSe‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <DNSe‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ DNSe‬ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪04:28‬‬
‫‪02:13‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ >‪،<Bass Boost>، <Vocal>، <Rock>، <Normal‬‬
‫>‪ <Concert Hall>، <Classical‬ﻭ >‪<User‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ >‪ <User‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ >‪ <EQ‬ﻭ>‪ <3D & BASS‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٥٠‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ‪ DNSe‬؟‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ )‪ (DNSe‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ MP3‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ _ ‪۴٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ)‪) (DNSe‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫>‪<EQ‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ DNSe‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫>‪ <User‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <EQ‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪15/20‬‬
‫‪EQ‬‬
‫‪3D & BASS‬‬
‫ƒ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ >‪ <EQ‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ>‪ <+10~-10‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﻪ ]‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫‪02:13‬‬
‫‪04:28‬‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<3D & BASS‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍی ‪ 3D‬ﻣﺤﻴﻄﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ DNSe‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫>‪ <User‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <3D & BASS‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪15/20‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪EQ‬‬
‫‪3D & BASS‬‬
‫ƒ ﺻﻔﺢﻩ >‪ <3D & BASS‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <3D‬ﻭ >‪<Bass‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ >‪ <3D‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ 0‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 4‬ﻭ >‪ <Bass‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ 0‬ﺗﺎ ‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪_ ۵٠‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫‪04:28‬‬
‫‪02:13‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪15/20‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Music‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Play Mode‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Sound Effect‬‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫‪Play Mode‬‬
‫‪Music Play Scre..‬‬
‫‪Add to Alarm‬‬
‫‪Play Speed‬‬
‫‪Rising‬‬
‫‪Sun‬‬
‫‪Skip Interval‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Play Mode‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪04:28‬‬
‫‪02:13‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Normal‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Repeat‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Repeat One‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Shuffle‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ _ ‪۵١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‚ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Music‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪15/20‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫>‪ <Music Play Screen‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Sound Effect‬‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫‪Play Mode‬‬
‫‪Music Play Screen‬‬
‫‪Add to Alarm‬‬
‫‪Play Speed‬‬
‫‪Rising‬‬
‫‪Sun‬‬
‫‪Skip Interval‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Music Play Screen‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪04:28‬‬
‫‪02:13‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Type 1 ~ Type 3‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Album Info.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺎگ ‪ ID3‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‚ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺁﺭﺗﻴﺴﺖ‚‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻭ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Album Art‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺎگ ‪ ID3‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 200‬ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ ) ﺍﻓﻘﻲ(‪ x200‬ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ )ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ( ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ : Auto Change‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ >‪ <Type 1‬ﺗﺎ‬
‫>‪ <Type 3‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ ID3 Tag‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ‪ ID3 Tag‬ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺒﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﮏ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪_ ۵٢‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‚ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٨۴‬ﺭﺍﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪15/20‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Music‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Add to Alarm‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Sound Effect‬‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫‪Play Mode‬‬
‫‪Music Play Scre..‬‬
‫‪Add to Alarm‬‬
‫‪Play Speed‬‬
‫‪Rising‬‬
‫‪Sun‬‬
‫‪Skip Interval‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪02:13‬‬
‫‪04:28‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Music‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪15/20‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Play Speed‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Sound Effect‬‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫‪Play Mode‬‬
‫‪Music Play Scre..‬‬
‫‪Add to Alarm‬‬
‫‪Play Speed‬‬
‫‪Rising‬‬
‫‪Sun‬‬
‫‪Skip Interval‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Play Speed‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ >‪<X 1.0(Nomal)> ،<X 0.9>، <X 0.8>، <X 0.7‬‬
‫> ‪ <X 1.2 >، <X 1.1‬ﻭ >‪.<X 1.3‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪04:28‬‬
‫‪02:13‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ƒ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ _ ‪۵٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﺍک ﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪15/20‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Music‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Skip Interval‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Sound Effect‬‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫‪Play Mode‬‬
‫‪Music Play Scre..‬‬
‫‪Add to Alarm‬‬
‫‪Play Speed‬‬
‫‪Rising‬‬
‫‪Sun‬‬
‫‪Skip Interval‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Skip interval‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﺮﺵ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ> ﻧﻮﻉ >‪ <30sec>, <10sec>, <5sec>, <1 Song‬ﻭ >‪.<1min‬‬
‫‪04:28‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ )‪ (VBR‬ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Ogg‬ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪_ ۵۴‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪02:13‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﮏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻳﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪﺍً ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Music‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪15/20‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Bookmark‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫‪Play Mode‬‬
‫‪Music Play Scre..‬‬
‫‪Add to Alarm‬‬
‫‪Play Speed‬‬
‫‪Skip Interval‬‬
‫‪Rising‬‬
‫‪Sun‬‬
‫‪Bookmark‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮی >‪ <Bookmark‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Add Bookmark‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ‪ /‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﻤﺒﻞ ] | [ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪02:13‬‬
‫‪04:28‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻗﺒﻼ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ >ﺑﻠﻲ< ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ(‪ /‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Music‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪15/20‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Bookmark‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Add Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Go to Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Delete Bookmark‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮی >‪ <Bookmark‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Go to Bookmark‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ >‪ <Delete Bookmark‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ >‪ <Go to Bookmark‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ >‪ <Delete Bookmark‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺣﺬﻓﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫‪04:28‬‬
‫‪02:13‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ _ ‪۵۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪ -‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٣۶~٣۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Video‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[‬
‫ﻣﻜﺚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺩﺭ ﻃﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭﻳﺪﻭ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﮑﺚ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[‬
‫>ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ<‬
‫ƒ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﮦ ﺍﺯ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﮦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪ SVI‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ۔ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﮦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ۔‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ _ ۵۶‬ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ‪ ،‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Video Track 1‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﻓﺘﻴﺪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ۔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ[ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ[‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Video Track 1‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻱ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Video Track 2‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ _ ‪۵٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﮏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻳﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪﺍً ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Video‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪Add‬‬
‫‪ <Bookmark‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ‪ /‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﻤﺒﻞ ] | [ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Add Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Go to Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Delete Bookmark‬‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫‪Brightness‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻗﺒﻼ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ >ﺑﻠﻲ< ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ(‪ /‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺩﺭ ﻃﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭﻳﺪﻭ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Video‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪Go to‬‬
‫‪ <Bookmark‬ﻳﺎ >‪ <Delete Bookmark‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ >‪ <Go to Bookmark‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ >‪ <Delete Bookmark‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮ‪.‬ﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ _ ۵٨‬ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Add Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Go to Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Delete Bookmark‬‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫‪Brightness‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ)‪(DNSe‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺩﺭ ﻃﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭﻳﺪﻭﻳﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Video‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <DNSe‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <DNSe‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Add Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Go to Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Delete Bookmark‬‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫‪Brightness‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<DNSe‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ >‪ <Drama>‚<Normal‬ﻭ >‪ <Action‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ‪ DNSe‬؟‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ )‪ (DNSe‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ MP3‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺩﺭ ﻃﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭﻳﺪﻭﻳﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Video‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Brightness‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Add Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Go to Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Delete Bookmark‬‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫‪Brightness‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Brightness‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ >‪ <٠~١٠‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ _ ‪۵٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪ -‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Pictures‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‪ /‬ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻗﺒﻠﻲ‪ /‬ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[‬
‫>ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ<‬
‫ƒ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ JPG‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻳﺘﺎی ﻧﻮک ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﯽ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ƒ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ>‪ ‚ <Media Studio‬ﺁﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ JPG‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ>‪ <File Browser‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢١‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ۶٠‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮕﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Picture‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Start Slideshow‬‬
‫‪Slideshow Speed‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪Rotate‬‬
‫‪Select as My Skin‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Music‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Music‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ >‪ :<Off‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍی ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ >‪ :<On‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﺵ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬
‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪١‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ]‬
‫ﺷﻮی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪٢‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫‪1/8‬‬
‫‪Pictures‬‬
‫‪Picture Image 1‬‬
‫‪Start Slideshow‬‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ]‬
‫ﺷﻮی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮ‪.‬ﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ _ ‪۶١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻣﺘﻮ ﻗﻒ ﮐﺮ ﺩﺯ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼ ﻳﺪ‬
‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪١‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Picture‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Stop Slideshow‬‬
‫‪Slideshow Speed‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪Rotate‬‬
‫‪Select as My Skin‬‬
‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪٢‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪Stop‬‬
‫‪ <Slideshow‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Picture‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪Slideshow‬‬
‫‪ <Speed‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Slideshow Speed‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ>‪ <Normal>‚<Fast‬ﻭ>‪ <Slow‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ۶٢‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Start Slideshow‬‬
‫‪Slideshow Speed‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪Rotate‬‬
‫‪Select as My Skin‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Picture‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Zoom‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Zoom‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Start Slideshow‬‬
‫‪Slideshow Speed‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪Rotate‬‬
‫‪Select as My Skin‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ>‪ <200%>‚<100%‬ﻭ>‪ <400%‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺼﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ _ ‪۶٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Picture‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Rotate‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Rotate‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Start Slideshow‬‬
‫‪Slideshow Speed‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪Rotate‬‬
‫‪Select as My Skin‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ>‪ <Right 90°>‚<Left 90°‬ﻭ>‪ <180°‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Picture‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫>‪ <Select as My Skin‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Start Slideshow‬‬
‫‪Slideshow Speed‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪Rotate‬‬
‫‪Select as My Skin‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ >‪ <My Skin‬ﺍﺯ >‪ <Menu Design>←<Menu Style> ←<Settings‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ۶۴‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪ -‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <FM Radio‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎ ﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮ ﺩ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪ ﺍ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺻﺪ ﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮ ﺩ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ƒ ﻋﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻱ ‪ FM‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻫﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪۶۵ _ FM‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪FM‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ >‪ <Searching‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Searching‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‚‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ۶۶‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﮦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﮦ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ‪ FM‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﮦ ﺷﺪﮦ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ۔‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ> ‪ < FM Radio‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫>‪ <Go to Preset Mode‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ >‪ <Preset‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ۔‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﯽ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺭﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Go to Preset Mo..‬‬
‫‪Add to Preset‬‬
‫‪Auto Preset‬‬
‫‪Start Recording‬‬
‫‪FM REC Quality‬‬
‫‪FM Sensitivity‬‬
‫‪FM Region‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ‪ FM‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ> ‪ < FM Radio‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫>‪ <Go to Manual Mode‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ >‪ <Manual‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪Go to Manual M..‬‬
‫‪Delete from Pre..‬‬
‫‪Auto Preset‬‬
‫‪Start Recording‬‬
‫‪FM REC Quality‬‬
‫‪FM Sensitivity‬‬
‫‪FM Region‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪۶٧ _ FM‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 30‬ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ MP3‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ..‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‪ -‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ> ‪ < FM Radio‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Add to Preset‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ٢-١‬ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ _ ۶٨‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪Go to Preset Mo..‬‬
‫‪Add to Preset‬‬
‫‪Auto Preset‬‬
‫‪Start Recording‬‬
‫‪FM REC Quality‬‬
‫‪FM Sensitivity‬‬
‫‪FM Region‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‪ -‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‚ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ> ‪ < FM Radio‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Auto Preset‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Go to Preset Mo..‬‬
‫‪Add to Preset‬‬
‫‪Auto Preset‬‬
‫‪Start Recording‬‬
‫‪FM REC Quality‬‬
‫‪FM Sensitivity‬‬
‫‪FM Region‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺼﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪۶٩ _ FM‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﮑﺮﻭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ> ‪ < FM Radio‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫>‪ <Delete from Preset‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٧٠‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪Go to Manual M..‬‬
‫‪Delete from Pre..‬‬
‫‪Auto Preset‬‬
‫‪Start Recording‬‬
‫‪FM REC Quality‬‬
‫‪FM Sensitivity‬‬
‫‪FM Region‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ> ‪ < FM Radio‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Start Recording‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Go to Manual M..‬‬
‫‪Delete from Pre..‬‬
‫‪Auto Preset‬‬
‫‪Start Recording‬‬
‫‪FM REC Quality‬‬
‫‪FM Sensitivity‬‬
‫‪FM Region‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﻳﺎ >‪ <No‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <No‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ >‪<Recorded File> ← <File Browser‬‬
‫← >‪ <FM Radio‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ 999‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ 30‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﺑﺎ ‪ 128Kbps، 2‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ”‪ .“FM_XXX. mp3‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ”‪ “FM‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ »‪ «XXX‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪٧١ _ FM‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ> ‪ < FM Radio‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<FM REC Quality‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ FM‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی >)‪، <Super High(192kbps‬‬
‫‪ <High(160kbps)> ،‬ﻭ >)‪ <Normal(128kbps‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Go to Manual M..‬‬
‫‪Delete from Pre..‬‬
‫‪Auto Preset‬‬
‫‪Start Recording‬‬
‫‪FM REC Quality‬‬
‫‪FM Sensitivity‬‬
‫‪FM Region‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺍﻯ ﺛﺌﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎ ﺳﻴﺖ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﻟﺠﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ‪ FM‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫>‪ <FM Sensitivity‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ> ‪ < FM Radio‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<FM Sensitivity‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ> ‪ < FM Sensitivity‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ>‪ <Middle>‚ <High‬ﻭ>‪ <Low‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ >‪ <High‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ƒ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮ‪.‬ﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫‪ _ ٧٢‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Go to Manual M..‬‬
‫‪Delete from Pre..‬‬
‫‪Auto Preset‬‬
‫‪Start Recording‬‬
‫‪FM REC Quality‬‬
‫‪FM Sensitivity‬‬
‫‪FM Region‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺍﻯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺣﻴﻪ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ‪ FM‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ> ‪ < FM Radio‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <FM Region‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ> ‪ < FM Region‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Go to Manual M..‬‬
‫‪Delete from Pre..‬‬
‫‪Auto Preset‬‬
‫‪Start Recording‬‬
‫‪FM REC Quality‬‬
‫‪FM Sensitivity‬‬
‫‪FM Region‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ>‪ <Japan>، <Korea/US‬ﻭ>‪ <Other Countries‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ >‪ <FM Region‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﻼ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ƒ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ FM‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ‬
‫ ‪ :Korea/US‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ‪ FM‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺎﻣﻬﺎی ‪ 100‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 87.5‬ﺗﺎ‬‫‪ 108.0‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ :Japan‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ‪ FM‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺎﻣﻬﺎی ‪ 100‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 76.0‬ﺗﺎ‬‫‪ 108.0‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ :Other Countries‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ‪ FM‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺎﻣﻬﺎی ‪ 50‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪87.50‬‬‫ﺗﺎ ‪ 108.00‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪٧٣ _ FM‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪی ﮐﻪ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٨۴‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ> ‪ < FM Radio‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Add to Alarm‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ‪ <FM Radio> ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٧۴‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪Delete from Pre..‬‬
‫‪Auto Preset‬‬
‫‪Start Recording‬‬
‫‪FM REC Quality‬‬
‫‪FM Sensitivity‬‬
‫‪FM Region‬‬
‫‪Add to Alarm‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ >‪ ‚<Media Studio‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻮگ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‪ RSS‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ RSS‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫‪ RSS‬ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻏﻨﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪ xml‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺏ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻮگ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ‚ ﺑﻠﻮگ ﻭ ‪UCC‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ -‬ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٣٣‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺏ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ‪ RSS-‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ>‪ <Subscribe‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫>‪ <Media Studio> <Datacasts‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ >‪ <URL‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫>► ‪ <Next‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫>‪ <Subscribe‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ ‚ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ >‪ <URL‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻭﺏ ‪ RSS‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‚ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ <OK> .٣‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ )ﺩﻳﺘﺎﻛﺴﺖ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﻪ >‪ <Datacasts> <Media Studiuo‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ _ ‪٧۵‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻃﺒﻖ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ >‪ <New Group‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫>‪ <Media Studio> <Datacasts‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫>‪<OK‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ >‪<MEDIA STUDIO‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ -‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٣٣‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ <Media Studio> .١‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‚ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫>‪ <Media Studio‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪YP-S٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫]‪Music < [YP-S٣‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ >‪ <Datacasts‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ‬
‫>‪ <Media Studio‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺘﺎﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۶‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ >‪ .<Datacasts> ← <File Browser‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺭ >‪ <Media Studio> <Datacasts‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‚ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺍﻭﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ‚ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﺏ ﺩﺍﻭﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٧۶‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ >‪ <Datacasts‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪-‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﭘﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ >‪.<Media Studio‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٧۶‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Datacasts‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ >‪ <Datacasts‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ >‪ < Datacasts‬ﺩﺭ>‪<Media Studio‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺴﺘﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻫﻀﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪1/4‬‬
‫ƒ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Datacasts‬‬
‫‪Datacast 1‬‬
‫ƒ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪Datacast 2‬‬
‫ƒ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪Datacast 3‬‬
‫ƒ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ƒ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫‪Datacast 4‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ _ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﻮ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻭﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻩ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺷﻤﺎ‚‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ‪ ...‬ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪ -‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ>‪ <Media Studio‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٣۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ>‪ <Contents> ← <Language> ← <Settings‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢٧‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Prime Pack‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Prime Pack‬‬
‫‪Text‬‬
‫‪Games‬‬
‫‪Alarm‬‬
‫ƒ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ >‪< Prime Pack‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Text‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪World Clock‬‬
‫[‬
‫ƒ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‪ /‬ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪ /‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢١‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ƒ ﺩﺳﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ TXT‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٧٨‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﻮ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪45.40%‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Text‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Music‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Music‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ >‪ :<Off‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Book1‬‬
‫‪It's a common fantasy:‬‬
‫‪rewind your life, erase all the‬‬
‫‪mistakes and cringe-worthy‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪moments and start over‬‬
‫‪Go‬‬
‫‪1st slate.‬‬
‫‪PageBut for‬‬
‫‪with to‬‬
‫‪a clean‬‬
‫‪Samantha Newly, the fantasy‬‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪Bookmark‬‬
‫‪is far too‬‬
‫‪real.‬‬
‫‪Go to Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Delete Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Font Size‬‬
‫‪Text Viewer Col..‬‬
‫ƒ >‪ :<On‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪45.40%‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Text‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Go to 1 st page‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Book1‬‬
‫‪It's a common fantasy:‬‬
‫‪rewind your life, erase all the‬‬
‫‪mistakes and cringe-worthy‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪moments and start over‬‬
‫‪Go‬‬
‫‪1st slate.‬‬
‫‪PageBut for‬‬
‫‪with to‬‬
‫‪a clean‬‬
‫‪Samantha Newly, the fantasy‬‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪Bookmark‬‬
‫‪is far too‬‬
‫‪real.‬‬
‫‪Go to Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Delete Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Font Size‬‬
‫‪Text Viewer Col..‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮ‪.‬ﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﻮ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ _ ‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﮏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻳﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Text‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Add Bookmark‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻤﺒﻞ‬
‫] [ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪45.40%‬‬
‫‪Book1‬‬
‫‪It's a common fantasy:‬‬
‫‪rewind your life, erase all the‬‬
‫‪mistakes and cringe-worthy‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪moments and start over‬‬
‫‪Go‬‬
‫‪1st slate.‬‬
‫‪PageBut for‬‬
‫‪with to‬‬
‫‪a clean‬‬
‫‪Samantha Newly, the fantasy‬‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪Bookmark‬‬
‫‪is far too‬‬
‫‪real.‬‬
‫‪Go to Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Delete Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Font Size‬‬
‫‪Text Viewer Col..‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻗﺒﻼ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‚ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ >‪ <Yes‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‚ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Text‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Go to Bookmark‬‬
‫>‪ <Delete Bookmark‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ >‪<Go to Bookmark‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ >‪ <Delete Bookmark‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺰﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٨٠‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﻮ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫‪45.40%‬‬
‫‪Book1‬‬
‫‪It's a common fantasy:‬‬
‫‪rewind your life, erase all the‬‬
‫‪mistakes and cringe-worthy‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪moments and start over‬‬
‫‪Go‬‬
‫‪1st slate.‬‬
‫‪PageBut for‬‬
‫‪with to‬‬
‫‪a clean‬‬
‫‪Samantha Newly, the fantasy‬‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪Bookmark‬‬
‫‪is far too‬‬
‫‪real.‬‬
‫‪Go to Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Delete Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Font Size‬‬
‫‪Text Viewer Col..‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ)ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﺭﺍﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪45.40%‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Text‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Book1‬‬
‫‪It's a common fantasy:‬‬
‫‪rewind your life, erase all the‬‬
‫‪mistakes and cringe-worthy‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪moments and start over‬‬
‫‪Go‬‬
‫‪1st slate.‬‬
‫‪PageBut for‬‬
‫‪with to‬‬
‫‪a clean‬‬
‫‪Samantha Newly, the fantasy‬‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪Bookmark‬‬
‫‪is far too‬‬
‫‪real.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Font Size‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Go to Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Delete Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Font Size‬‬
‫‪Text Viewer Col..‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Font Size‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ >‪ <Medium>‚ <Small‬ﻭ>‪ <Large‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺌﻈﻴﻢ ﺭ ﺋﮓ ﺫﻣﺎ ﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﺰ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Text‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪45.40%‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Text Viewer Color‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ >‪ <Text Viewer Color‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎ ﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻳﮏی ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی >‪ <Type 6> ~ <Type 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻦﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Book1‬‬
‫‪It's a common fantasy:‬‬
‫‪rewind your life, erase all the‬‬
‫‪mistakes and cringe-worthy‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪moments and start over‬‬
‫‪Go‬‬
‫‪1st slate.‬‬
‫‪PageBut for‬‬
‫‪with to‬‬
‫‪a clean‬‬
‫‪Samantha Newly, the fantasy‬‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪Bookmark‬‬
‫‪is far too‬‬
‫‪real.‬‬
‫‪Go to Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Delete Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Font Size‬‬
‫‪Text Viewer Color‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﻮ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ _ ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻴﺠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ mp3‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ!‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪ -‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Prime Pack‬ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫[‬
‫ƒ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ >‪ <Prime Pack‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Games‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ >‪ <Games‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺯی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺲ ﺑﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﭼﭗ ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮپ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﭘﻴﺘﺰﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺘﺰﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﻧﻊ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭی‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺴﺖ ﺩﻭﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺮﻳﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٨٢‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﻮ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫‪Prime Pack‬‬
‫‪Text‬‬
‫‪Games‬‬
‫‪Alarm‬‬
‫‪World Clock‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﯽ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺯﻧﺒﻮﺭ ﻋﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﭼﭗ ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻐﻮ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ژﻭﻧﮕﻤﻮﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺯی ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﻼﻗﻴﺖ ﺁﻧﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﭼﭗ ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﻭ ] [ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻨﮓ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﺩ ﮐﻴﻨﮓ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻓﮑﺮی ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﻠﻮک ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﺋﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻏﺬﺍﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺷﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ƒ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﻮ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ _ ‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪ -‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Prime Pack‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ >‪ <Prime Pack‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Prime Pack‬‬
‫‪Text‬‬
‫‪Games‬‬
‫‪Alarm‬‬
‫‪World Clock‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Alarm‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <New Alarm‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Alarm‬‬
‫‪New Alarm‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی >‪، <Mon~Fri> ، <Everyday> ، <Once‬‬
‫>‪ <Sat~Sun> ، <Mon~Sat‬ﻭ >‪ <Off‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۶‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫]ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫]ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ>‪ <AM‬ﻳﺎ>‪ <FM‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ _ ٨۴‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﻮ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫]ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ یﮐﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی >‪ <Alarm Sound 1‬ﺗﺎ >‪ <Alarm Sound 3‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی >‪,<Interval : 3min>, <Interval : Off‬‬
‫>‪ <Interval : 5min‬ﻭ >‪ <Interval : 10min‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪New‬‬
‫‪New Alarm‬‬
‫‪AlarmSettings‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪Once‬‬
‫‪AM‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫▲‬
‫‪Alarm Sound 1‬‬
‫▼‬
‫‪Interval : Off‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ )‬
‫( ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٧‬ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ƒ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ‪ [ ] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻭ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﻮ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ _ ‪٨۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﻮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺁﻻﺭﻣﻀﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﭼﭗ ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﻭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Alarm‬‬
‫‪New Alarm‬‬
‫‪08:00 AM‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻄﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪] .٢‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٨۶‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﻮ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫‪Alarm‬‬
‫‪New Alarm‬‬
‫‪08:00 AM‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ /‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﻬﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪ -‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ >‪ <Time Zone> ← <Time> ← <Settings‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪Prime Pack‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Prime Pack‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ >‪ <Prime Pack‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <World Clock‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Text‬‬
‫‪Games‬‬
‫‪Alarm‬‬
‫‪World Clock‬‬
‫ƒ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)’‪‘/‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ(‬
‫‪/ Cape Verde / London, Lisbon / Rome, Paris / Athens, Helsinki / Moscow, Riyadh‬‬
‫‪/ Abu Dhabi, Muskat / Tashkent, Ashgabat / Alma Ata, Kathmandu / Bangkok, Jakarta‬‬
‫‪Hong Kong, Beijing / Seoul, Tokyo / Guam, Sydney / Okhotsk / Wellingtons, Oakland /‬‬
‫‪/ Samoa, Midway / Honolulu, Hawaii / Alyeska / Los Angeles, Seattle‬‬
‫‪/ Denver, Phoenix / Chicago, Mexico City / New York, Miami, / Caracas, Santiago‬‬
‫‪Buenos Aires, Brasilia / The middle Atlantic‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﻮ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ _ ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺣﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺑﮕﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮی ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﮑﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﻼ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣ ً‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ‪ Reset‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻠﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ‪ Reset‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ >‪ <Display Off‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫>‪ <Display> ← <Settings‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٨٨‬ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺸﮑﻞ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣ ً‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ>‪ <Auto Power Off‬ﺍﺯ>‪<System> ← <Settings‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﻣﻜﺚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮء ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪Media‬‬
‫‪Studio‬‬
‫• ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• >‪ <Start‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫‪ Windows Update‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪Key Updates and .‬‬
‫‪ Service Packs‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ‪ 2000‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﮦ ﺍﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺂﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ‪ XP‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Vista‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ _ ‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﮑﻞ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻭ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﮦ ﺍﺳﺖ۔‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ‪ Reset‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﮦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﯽ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺪی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﯽ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪) VBR‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ( ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺏﻩ >‪ <Contents> ← <Language> ← <Settings‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺷﻴﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢٧‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮی ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻤﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﭗ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺩﺍﻭﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٩٠‬ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ‬MP3 ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﯽ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
.‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
Music
Videos
Pictures
FM Radio
Datacasts
Prime Pack
File Browser
Settings
Text
Menu
Style
Games
Sound
Alarm
Display
World Clock
Library
Update
Language
Time
System
٩١ _ ‫ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬
‫‪YP-S3‬‬
‫‪ 5.0‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ 500 /‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ‬
‫‪ 580‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ 3.7 /‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‪ MPEG1/2/2.5 :‬ﻻﻳﻪ ‪, 8kbps~320kbps) 3‬‬
‫‪,48kHz~192kHz) WMA (8kbps~48kbps‬‬
‫‪(Q1~Q10) Ogg ,(8kHz~48kHz‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‪) SVI :‬ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‪ ,MPEG4 :‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪MP3 :‬‬
‫‪(44.1kHz ,128kbps),‬‬
‫ﺭﺯﻭﻻﺳﻴﻮﻥ‪(Frame Rate: 15fps, 208x176 :‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪) JPG :‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺭﻭﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ‬
‫‪ )5000‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ( ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 20‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺕ ‪ /‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ )ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪ 16‬ﺍﻫﻢ(‬
‫‪ 40‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺗﺎ ‪ 20‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 90‬ﺩﺳﻲ ﺑﻞ ‪ 20‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪)LPF‬ﻭﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪ 1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ 0‬ﺩﺳﻲ ﺑﻞ(‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ 25‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪ 4 ،‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫)ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪ ،MP3 128kbps :‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪی ﺻﺪﺍ ‪ ،15 :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی(‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﻤﻖ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﺮﺽ(‬
‫)‪-5~35°C (23~95°F‬‬
‫ﺁﺏ ﻓﻠﺰﮐﺎﺭی‪ ،‬ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﮏ‬
‫‪ 53‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ‪44 X 95 X 9.8‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ FM‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ‬
‫‪108.0MHz~87.5‬‬
‫‪55 dB‬‬
‫‪FM T.H.D‬‬
‫‪1%‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺩی ‪FM‬‬
‫‪38dBμ‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﭽﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٩٢‬ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﻌﻨﻮی ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﮕﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ‪ ISO/IEC 11172-3‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ISO/IEC 13818-3‬ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻭ‪/‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺸﺎﻳﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ‪ISO/IEC 11172-3‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ‪ ISO/IEC 13818-3‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﯽ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ ISO/IEC 11172-3‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ISO/IEC 13818-3‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ _ ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ‬SAMSUNG ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮی‬،‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻈﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬
.‫ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬SAMSUNG
Country
CANADA
MEXICO
U.S.A
ARGENTINE
BRAZIL
CHILE
NICARAGUA
HONDURAS
COSTA RICA
ECUADOR
EL SALVADOR
GUATEMALA
JAMAICA
PANAMA
PUERTO RICO
REP. DOMINICA
TRINIDAD & TOBAGO
VENEZUELA
COLOMBIA
BELGIUM
CZECH REPUBLIC
DENMARK
FINLAND
Customer Care Center 1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
01-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0800-333-3733
0800-124-421 , 4004-0000
800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
00-1800-5077267
800-7919267
0-800-507-7267
1-800-10-7267
800-6225
1-800-299-0013
1-800-234-7267
800-7267
1-800-682-3180
1-800-751-2676
1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0-800-100-5303
01-8000112112
0032 (0)2 201 24 18
844 000 844
70 70 19 70
030-6227 515
FRANCE
3260 SAMSUNG ( 0,15/Min),
08 25 08 65 65 ( 0,15/Min)
GERMANY
HUNGARY
ITALIA
LUXEMBURG
NETHERLANDS
01805 - SAMSUNG(726-7864) (
06-80-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0035 (0)2 261 03 710
0900-SAMSUNG(726-7864) (
Web Site
www.samsung.com/ca
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/ar
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/cl
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com.co
www.samsung.com/be
www.samsung.com/cz
www.samsung.com/dk
www.samsung.com/fi
www.samsung.com
0,14/Min)
0,10/Min)
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/be
www.samsung.com/nl
Country
NORWAY
POLAND
PORTUGAL
SLOVAKIA
SPAIN
SWEDEN
U.K
EIRE
AUSTRIA
SWITZERLAND
RUSSIA
KAZAHSTAN
UZBEKISTAN
KYRGYZSTAN
TADJIKISTAN
UKRAINE
LITHUANIA
LATVIA
ESTONIA
AUSTRALIA
NEW ZEALAND
CHINA
HONG KONG
INDIA
INDONESIA
JAPAN
MALAYSIA
PHILIPPINES
SINGAPORE
THAILAND
TAIWAN
VIETNAM
TURKEY
SOUTH AFRICA
U.A.E
Customer Care Center 815-56 480
0 801 801 881 , 022-607-93-33
80820-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
902 10 11 30
0771-400 200
0845 SAMSUNG (7267864)
0818 717 100
0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
8-800-555-55-55
8-10-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
8-800-502-0000
8-800-77777
800-7267
800-7267
1300 362 603
0800SAMSUNG(726-7864)
800-810-5858 , 010-6475 1880
3698-4698
3030 8282 , 1800 110011
0800-112-8888
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
1800-10-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
1800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
1800-29-3232 , 02-689-3232
0800-329-999
1 800 588 889
444 77 11
0860-SAMSUNG(726-7864 )
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 8000-4726
Web Site
www.samsung.com/no
www.samsung.com/pl
www.samsung.com/pt
www.samsung.com/sk
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/se
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/ie
www.samsung.com/at
www.samsung.com/ch
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.kz
www.samsung.uz
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.lt
www.samsung.com/lv
www.samsung.ee
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/nz
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/jp
www.samsung.com/my
www.samsung.com/ph
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/tw
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
REV.0.0
Download PDF

advertising